Dodge User Manual 2 PDF

2014 Challenger
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Challenger
Chrysler Group LLC
14D491-126-AC Third Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci- vehicle.
dents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im-
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligation
friend, or use public transportation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac-
tured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per-
ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
drink and then drive.
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart-
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 2
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .28 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .29 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .53
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .54
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .65
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 2
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .96
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
the ignition switch with either side up. is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
If this vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-
feature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
N-Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Operating” for further information.
(EVIC) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/
ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi- 2
tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ing.
1 — OFF NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
2 — ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY) the Vehicle Security Alarm armed, will result in the alarm
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery
is dead) into the ignition switch to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm or press the Start/Stop button to disarm
the security alarm.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
on the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull Remove the Start/Stop button (if equipped), place the
the key out with your other hand. shift lever in PARK or place the manual transmission in
REVERSE and apply the parking brake. Turn the Key Fob
to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. Refer
to “Starting And Operating/Starting Procedures” for
further information on removing the Start/Stop button.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ system, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sun-
CAUTION! (Continued)
roof — if equipped, and ignition-powered power outlets
will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition • Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either • Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery. 2
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- WARNING!
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information. • Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK or the
CAUTION! manual transmission in REVERSE, and remove the
Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this access to an unlocked vehicle.
condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key (Continued)
for locking and unlocking the doors.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- OFF with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, and lock all doors
dren should be warned not to touch the parking when leaving the vehicle unattended.
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or Key-In-Ignition Reminder
in a location accessible to children, and do not
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle. NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may position.
cause serious injury or death.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition
switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped)
will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Start- After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
ing Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
information. seconds for a bulb check. In addition, if the light begins to
flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used 2
SENTRY KEY® an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. If the light remains
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau- on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The with the electronics. This condition will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
or unlocked. vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
The system uses a Key Fob with factory-mated Remote seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. as possible by an authorized dealer.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat- • Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting tended.
problems and loss of security protection. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have position.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
Replacement Keys
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
authorized dealer. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Customer Key Programming VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM 2
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer. and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
General Information for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the fol-
subject to the following conditions: lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
• This device may not cause harmful interference. the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
• This device must accept any interference that may be instrument cluster will flash.
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
Rearming Of The System 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn • Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off with the driver and/or passenger door open.
after an additional 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle • Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Security Alarm will rearm itself. Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
To Arm The System same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: further information).
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF” • Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting (RKE) transmitter.
And Operating⬙ for further information).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
To Disarm The System NOTE: The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
the following methods: Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during 2
Entry (RKE) transmitter. trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things alarm will sound.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information). • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button • The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, previously described arming sequences has occurred,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
key to the ON position. whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery ILLUMINATED ENTRY
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this doors or open any door.
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
Tamper Alert
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the ther information.
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
Security System Manual Override switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the NOTE:
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) 2

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
the ignition switch disables the system from responding To Unlock The Doors
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door. The turn
RKE transmitters. signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all • When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
button while still holding the LOCK button.
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument panel” for further information. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry), 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the Key Fob removed.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the its previous setting.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN- 2
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans-
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
the Key Fob removed.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock feature. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
formation.
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- • When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
To Lock The Doors mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
ter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash holding the LOCK button.
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry), 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock removed.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated turn on.
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless 2
to deactivate the Security Alarm. you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
To Open The Trunk (24 km/h) or greater.
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two NOTE:
times within five seconds to open the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry), switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. and horn will remain on.
Using The Panic Alarm • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement 3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. “gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ operation.
perchlorate General Information
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of following conditions:
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
the elastomer seal during removal.
• This device must accept any interference received,
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
including interference that may cause undesired op-
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
eration.
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE:
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal 2
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
distance, check for these two conditions:
reduce this range.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
How To Use Remote Start
the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
engine will remote start:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios. • Shift lever in PARK
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Doors closed

• Hood closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Hazard switch off
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Ignition key removed from ignition switch
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
WARNING! (Continued)
• RKE PANIC button not pressed • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
• System not disabled from previous remote start event away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
• Vehicle theft alarm not active could cause serious injury or death.
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
To Enter Remote Start Mode
WARNING!
Press and release the REMOTE START button
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in- programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
jury or death when inhaled. will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
(Continued)
NOTE: To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later. Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. 2
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Start request.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
third cycle. press and release the START/STOP button. If the
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: Cancel Remote Start
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the occur:
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle. • The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- • Any engine warning lights come on
Go™ feature, the message “Insert Key/Turn To On”
will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. • Low Fuel Light turns on
Once inserted, the message “Turn To On” will display • The hood is opened
in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN.
• The hazard switch is pressed
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will • The shift lever is moved out of PARK
display in the EVIC until you push the START button. • The brake pedal is pressed
DOOR LOCKS If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
Manual Door Locks
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
2
WARNING!
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
Door Lock Knob
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden- auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to Please see your authorized dealer for service.
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition, 2
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. The doors will unlock automatically if:
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
through your EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings” for additional 4. The driver door is opened.
information.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming NOTE:
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor- “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
strument Panel” for further information. further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
in accordance with local laws. raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ sponse time.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to alarm.
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side: NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to 2
handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
unlocked.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger
door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Trunk:
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a of the deck lid, press the button on the located on the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the center of the light bar which is located on the deck lid
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door above the license plate.
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any Passive Entry RKE trans-
mitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE trans-
mitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
Trunk Passive Entry Button
RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit- 2
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
Power Windows
door. The window controls will operate only when the
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the door windows.
2
NOTE:
• The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Pro-
grammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
Power Window Switches
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
WARNING!
to the first detent and release it when you want the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do window to stop.
not let children play with power windows. Do not To stop the window from going all the way down during
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- The power window switches will remain active for up to
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
particularly unattended children, can become en- Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
trapped by the windows while operating the power this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
window switches. Such entrapment may result in Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
serious injury or death. Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped
Wind Buffeting
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down fea- Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
ture. Press the window switch to the second detent, pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
release, and the window will go down automatically. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis-
one window open, then open the other window to sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the before the button will operate. 2
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to mini-
mize the buffeting.
The trunk lid can be released from
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE outside the vehicle by pressing the
Trunk Release button on the Re-
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by mote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located mitter twice within five seconds or
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. by using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release fea-
Trunk Release
ture will function only when the
Button
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
will reappear once the trunk is closed. trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym- in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
bol will display until the trunk is closed. heat stroke.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Trunk Emergency Release
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
WARNING! glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
(Continued)
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window 2
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for
the driver and front outboard passenger
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Trunk Emergency Internal Release • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
energy during an impact event
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems: • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all passengers
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
item in a seat — if equipped
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
Please pay close attention to the information in this buckled up in a rear seat.
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as WARNING!
possible.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold years or younger, including a child in a rearward
infant and child restraint systems. For more information facing infant seat.
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
CHildren (LATCH). vehicle with a rear seat.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
severity and type of collision. positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
their arm. side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door. 2
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
(Refer to “Child Restraints”) the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
You should read the instructions provided with your under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Front Air Bags room to inflate. Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
could cause serious injury, including death. Air led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
instrument panel. vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the you to be severely injured or killed.
seat.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
(Continued) on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
WARNING!
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat 2
be belted at all times. belts.
Lap/Shoulder Belts • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
lap/shoulder belts. belts are designed to go around the large bones of
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during your body. These are the strongest parts of your
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the body and can take the forces of a collision best.
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
vehicle or being thrown out. of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the Latch Plate
belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
belt is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
plate will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go
around your lap.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snug.
Latch Plate To Buckle (Continued)

belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the WARNING!
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter- • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
nal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli- your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
sion. possible and keep it snug.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect • A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
you from injury during a collision. You are more collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
are meant to be used together. ately and have it fixed.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system 2
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Removing Slack From Belt
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. shoulder belt.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, Driver Center Passenger
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
First Row N/A N/A ALR
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of • N/A — Not Applicable
the latch plate. • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
folded webbing. ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
feature for each seating position. latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Equipped hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode 2
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
locking mode.
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until working properly when checked according to the
the entire belt is extracted. procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
collision. straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
the occupant’s chest. (BeltAlert®)
Seat Belt Pretensioners BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
The seat belts for both front seating positions are front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
These devices may improve the performance of the seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- fastened.
pants, including those in child restraints.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. stowed.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho- 2
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder deactivating BeltAlert®.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
notification. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the the best way to keep the baby safe.
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision. low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
Seat Belt Extender needed.
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
tender and store it. passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
WARNING! words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
(Continued)
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision. 2
This vehicle is equipped with driver and/or front pas-
senger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/front passen-
ger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver
or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
vanced Front Air Bags.
2 — Knee Bolster This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
Advanced Air Bags. the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side • Steering Wheel and Column
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver,
• Instrument Panel
front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The
SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and • Knee Impact Bolsters
their covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately. • Front and Side Impact Sensors
Air Bag System Components • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag and Seat Track Position Sensors
system components: Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
• Air Bag Warning Light
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an damage the air bags and you could be injured 2
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output because the air bags may no longer be functional.
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
used for more severe collisions. designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
WARNING! • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
etc.
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
2
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain not have any accessory items installed which will
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
high enough to block the location of the SABIC. vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
The area where the SABIC is located should remain nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
free from any obstructions. on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects vehicle for any reason.
between you and the side air bags; the performance • Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be body outside of the window.
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
(Continued)
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air 2
child. bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
Knee Impact Bolsters
severity and type of impact.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
driver and front passengers, and position front occupants
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
Bags.
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system the other hand, depending on the type and location of
required for this vehicle.
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
severe initial deceleration.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
type of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should when the ignition is first turned on. After the
have deployed. self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
away from an inflating air bag.
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
are possible, based on several factors, including the
WARNING!
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to 2
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
air bag system immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
Inflator Units bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
Inflator Units (SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de- During collisions where the impact is confined to a
signed to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
especially applies to children.
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of the battery has power or until the ignition key is
whether or not an air bag should have deployed. removed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors • Unlock the doors automatically. 2
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
events. changed from IGN ON/RUN to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
the communication network remains intact, and the immediately after deployment.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
the air bag system.
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
or all of the following may occur: continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
structions for cleaning.
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. WARNING!
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
immediately. protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system not function properly if modifications are made. 2
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
be injured if the air bag system is not there to air bag system service. If your seat, including your
protect you. Do not modify the components or trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
add aftermarket side steps or running boards. modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the air bag system immediately.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
cycled to the ON/RUN. assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
eight-second interval.
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
as: non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) 2
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
were buckled/fastened; forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
crash investigation.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• How fast the vehicle was traveling. required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
These data can help provide a better understanding of In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This NOTE:
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• For additional information, refer to
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in website for additional information:
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
There are different sizes and types of restraints for childsafety-index-53.htm
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child WARNING!
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat. hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has how strong you are. The child and others could be
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible 2
Toddlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
height or weight limits of their child re- seat of the vehicle
straint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
who have out-grown the height or weight five-point Harness, facing forward in the
limit of their rear-facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
forward-facing child restraint, but are too hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt vehicle
Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
for Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight limit the vehicle
of their booster seat
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible years or younger, including a child in a rearward
child seats. facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle with a rear seat.
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Older Children And Child Restraints
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
WARNING!
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
All children whose weight or height is above the infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a collision. The child could be badly injured or
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over directions exactly when installing an infant or
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against child restraint.
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
in the vehicle by the seat belt. because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it way back?
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
serious personal injury. between their neck and arm?
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
WARNING!
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri- Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt 2
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of will not protect a child properly, which may result in
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, serious injury or death. A child must always wear
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

Combined
Weight of the LATCH –
Restraint Type LATCH –
Child + Child Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only
Restraint + Top Tether Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- 2
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-

ing position
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the 2
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center N/A
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it 2
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here. 2
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or belt following the instructions below. See the section
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
position. Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
WARNING!
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical anchorages.
installation instructions.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the in any direction.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
to allow more room for the child seat.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.
ing position. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
tions to attach a tether anchor. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
turer’s instructions. and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
WARNING!
Belt
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 2
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of the 2
facing child restraint? child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al-
seat? lowed, if the child restraint manu-
facturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to Yes In positions with cinching latch
tighten the seat belt against the belt plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
path of the child restraint? may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a vehicle seat.
“click”.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints You may also move the front seat forward to allow
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to more room for the car seat.
attach a tether anchor. 2
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) path.
in any direction.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the “click”.
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
anchor. the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
any direction. Anchorage
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
seat forward to provide better access to the
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
position in the vehicle if one is available.
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 1. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint. restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 2
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting

1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING! injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
child. Use only the anchorage position directly or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
opening between the seatbacks as you remove vehicle.
slack in the strap.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
be detrimental and should be avoided. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check 2
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
the break in period. Add oil as required.
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be SAFETY TIPS
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom- Transporting Passengers
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. AREA.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
in the engine or damage may result. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people follow these safety tips:
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
injured or killed. confined areas any longer than needed to move
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your your vehicle in or out of the area.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
belts. rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
using a seat belt properly. set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
Exhaust Gas • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
WARNING! controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon blower at high speed.
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
(Continued)
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat 2
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
Air Bag Warning Light
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised The light should come on and remain on for
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Vehicle
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
Seat Belts driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Defroster
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
system. the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
Floor Mat Safety Information secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area vehicle.
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
WARNING! • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of been removed for cleaning.
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury. (Continued)
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal 2
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Lights
control. Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in- exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
stalled, if not equipped from the factory. signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or panel.
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of Door Latches
control of the vehicle. Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Fluid Leaks

The Vehicle Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
Tires engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun 3
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .109
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .143 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .162
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .163
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . .153
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .159
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .168 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
3
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 ▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .171 ▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . .181
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .182
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .185 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .186 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . .186 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .188 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . .190 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .193 ▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . .202 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
3
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right 3
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand
toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the
control wand in the direction you want the mirror to
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn 3
the control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
Power Mirror Control

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use Visor
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light. parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
visor and pull rearward. vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your 3
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile,”
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit
Slide-On-Rod Extender
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Cana-
dian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
WARNING!
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s Any voice commanded system should be used only
microphone for private conversation. in safe driving conditions following all applicable
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. tention should be focused on safely operating the
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
standard that enables different electronic devices to con- causing serious injury or death.
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone Button
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as The radio or steering wheel controls (if
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to equipped) will contain the two control buttons
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone (Uconnect® Phone button and Voice Com-
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the mand button) that will enable you to
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be access the system. When you press the button you will
used with the system at a time. The system is available in hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep
English, Spanish, or French languages. is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
“Operation” section. menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available 3
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
details. beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right “Pair a Device,” the following compound command
switch), if so equipped. can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device.”
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on compound form of the voice command is given. You
certain radios. can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
example, you can use the compound form voice com- button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
mand “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
compound form command into two voice commands: button on the radio control head.
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Cancel Command
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
sitting a few feet/meters away from you. you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
Voice Command Tree
previous menu.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
Help Command To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
pairing instructions: priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
• Press the button to begin.
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
“Device Pairing.” connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority 3
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi- and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
after the initial pairing process. “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
• The system will prompt you to say the number you or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
want to call. name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook,” in the phonebook.
• For example, you can say “234 567 8901.”
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
appear in the display of certain radios.
of certain radios.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Call By Saying A Name
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
“Call.” names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
person you want to call.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previ-
by Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
start the vehicle. ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook 3
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
able for use. “Phonebook New Entry.”
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
phone is accessible. long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob.”
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
NOTE:
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired. • Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding. • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Press the button to begin.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry.”
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
entry that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati-
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu. entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries 3
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete.”
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature. • After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• Press the button to begin. language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete.” deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook
• Press the button to begin. • Press the button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.” “Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you • The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted. • To call one of the names in the list, press the but-
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
“Call.”
is deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
operations at this point.
deleted or edited.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
The following features can be accessed through the Currently In Progress
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile phone. Press the button to place the current 3
mobile service provider for the features that you have. call on hold and answer the incoming call.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
Currently In Progress market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the Progress
call, press and hold the button until you hear a single
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Conference Call
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
to “Conference Call” in this section. hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Three-Way Calling
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the but- To initiate three-way calling, press the button while
ton until you hear a single beep. a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
Toggling Between Calls described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.” After the second call has established,
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press and hold the button until you hear a double
press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
one conference call.
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but-
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on Call Continuation
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
Redial able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
3
• Press the button to begin. • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
“Redial.”
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain dura-
Uconnect® Phone. tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mo-
bile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect® Phone Features Emergency Assistance
Language Selection If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
language selection. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change Mexico.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • turned on,
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • paired to the Uconnect® System,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may • and have network coverage.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area. Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance 3
• If supported, this number may be programmable on If you need roadside assistance:
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
“Towing Assistance.”
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly. NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assis-
tance phone number using the Voice Command system.
WARNING! To do this, press the button and say “Setup,” followed by
“Towing Assistance.” When prompted say 1-800-521-
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emer- 2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454 for Mexico City
gency, your mobile phone must be: and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico.
(Continued)
Paging When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
Voice Mail Calling can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.”
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
with Automated Systems”. “Send,” is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
Working With Automated Systems to leave a number on a pager.
This method is used in instances where one generally has You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
navigating through an automated telephone system. entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail call and then press the button and say “Send.” The
system or an automated service, such as a paging service system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
or automated customer service line. Some services re- say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
tones over the phone. from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
NOTE: will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • Press the button to begin. 3
network configurations. This is normal. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time one of the following:
out settings that are too short and may not allow the – “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
use of this feature.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
Phone And Network Status Indicators
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to notification to inform you of your phone and network
select that option without having to listen to the rest of status when you are attempting to make a phone call
the voice prompt.
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the button.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
• Press the button.
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Advanced Phone Connectivity
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
audio. without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones.”
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the button
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
and say “Transfer Call.”
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone being announced, press the button and say “Se-
lect” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an 3
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
with one electronic device at a time. Select Another Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between your mobile phone and the phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the button at any time while the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say list is being played, and then choose the phone that
“Setup Phone Pairing.” you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
call. If the selected phone is not available, the Phone
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
“Setup Phone Pairing.” Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
prompts. dures:
• You can also press the button at any time while the From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
list is being played, and then choose the phone you radio mode):
wish to delete. • Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
• Press the button and say the “Voice Training,” This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
mand. prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to 3
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
system will adapt to the last trained voice only. you.
Reset • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.” • Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Low road noise
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo-
• Smooth road surface
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• Fully closed windows entries are not similar.
• Dry weather condition • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
NOTE:
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number
cents, the system may not always work for some. combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.” compromised with the convertible top down.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
Far End Audio Performance • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
Recent Calls
• Low-to-medium blower setting
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed load,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- 3
• Low road noise ing and Missed Calls.
• Smooth road surface SMS
• Fully closed windows Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
• Dry weather conditions, and
Read Messages:
• Operation from the driver’s seat.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
not the Uconnect® Phone. If you wish to hear the new message:
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced • Press the button.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say To send a message, press the button while the
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” system is listing the message and say “Send.”
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
you. number of the person you wish to send the message to.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages:
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
1. Yes
Send Messages:
2. No
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
3. Where are you?
a new message:
4. I need more direction
5. L O L
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.” 6. Why
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 7. I love you
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
11. See You in 15 minutes Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
12. I am on my way sages.
13. I’ll be late • Press the button.
3
14. Are you there yet?
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
15. Where are we meeting? will then be given a choice to change it.
16. Can this wait? Bluetooth® Communication Link
17. Bye for now Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
18. When can we meet? can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
19. Send number to call Bluetooth® ON mode.
20. Start without me Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
Voice Commands all

Primary Alternate (s) call
zero cancel
one confirmation prompts
two continue 3
three delete
four dial
five download
six edit
seven emergency
eight English
nine erase all
star (*) Espanol
plus (+) Francais
pound (#) help
add location home
language select phone select

list names send
list phones set up phone settings or phone
mobile set up
mute towing assistance
mute off transfer call
new entry Uconnect® Tutorial
no voice training
other work
pair a phone yes
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
General Information VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, 3
the party responsible for compliance could void the USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
user’s authority to operate the equipment. devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received,
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
Pressing the Voice Command button while the
WARNING!
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
Any voice commanded system should be used only will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
in safe driving conditions following all applicable change commands. This will become helpful once you
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- start to learn the options.
tention should be focused on safely operating the NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision “Help” or “Main Menu.”
causing serious injury or death.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
options.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists set to low.
options, press the Voice Command button, listen for
the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
system.
Commands 3
Main Menu
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
main menu.
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active. In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Changing The Volume • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
button.
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth® Radio FM
Streaming mode) To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Radio AM • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Satellite Radio
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) USB Mode
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) 3
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Disc Mode
Name, Track Name, etc.)
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
may say the following commands:
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
• “Track” (#) (to change the track) “Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
• “Next Track” (to play the next track) following commands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
Memo Mode – “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In – “Delete” (to delete a memo)
this mode, you may say the following commands: – “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
one of the following commands: following:
– “Save” (to save the memo) • “Change to system setup”
– “Continue” (to continue recording) • “Main menu system setup”
– “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Switch to system setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Change to setup”
During the playback you may press the Voice Com- • “Main menu setup” or
mand button to stop playing memos. You pro-
ceed by saying one of the following commands: • “Switch to setup”
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) In this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language English”
• “Language French” 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the Voice Training
• “Language Spanish”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
• “Tutorial” parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-
• “Voice Training”
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the 3
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice last trained voice only.
Command button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands. SEATS
Voice Training Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® WARNING!
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
or killed.
and will improve recognition.
(Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
used to control the position of the seat. Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup-
port. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
raise and lower the position of the support.
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
3
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar Power Lumbar Switch
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Do not place any article under a power seat or
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
control which could cause a collision and serious the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
injury or death. movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat path.
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Heated Seats — If Equipped
seat belt. The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. heaters provide the same average heat level for both the
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, cushion and the seatback.
which could result in serious injury or death.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located near the bottom center
of the instrument panel.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
WARNING!
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
heating. Press the switch a second time to select tion or other physical condition must exercise care 3
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
time to shut the heating elements OFF. even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system will auto- • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
matically switch to the LOW-level after a maximum of 60 insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the num- This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
ber of indicators illuminated changes from two to one, in a seat that has been overheated could cause
indicating the change. Operation on the LOW-level set- serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ting also turns OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 ture of the seat.
minutes.
Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes. The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
WARNING!
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
the lever, lean forward and release the lever. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows 3
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.
Easy Entry Lever

Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
WARNING!
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- return to their normal position see your authorized
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- dealer immediately.
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the downward on the head restraint.
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a 3
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
Push Button
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by not in use.
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Folding Rear Seat Folded Rear Seat

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- 3
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system. Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
Hood Safety Catch when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlights And Parking Lights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, 3
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the Panel” for further information.
ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic
Headlight Time Delay
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position. This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
unlit area.
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
Automatic Headlights Only)
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will The headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights
cancel the delay. (DRL) whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will position, the headlights are off and the parking brake is
turn off in the normal manner. released. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving. 3
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this If vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge
feature. (HID) headlights, the front turn signal lamps provide the
DRL function. If equipped, the DRL will flash when a
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to turn signal is in operation, and return to DRL mode when
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ the turn signal is no longer flashing.
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-

light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and
press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either press the headlight switch again or turn off the
Fog Light Operation
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever Turn Signals
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE: 3
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con-
tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Lane Change Assist NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
will shut off.
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off. Map/Reading Lights
High/Low Beam Switch These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Flash-To-Pass transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by turned fully upward, past the second detent.
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is located to the right of the head- 3
light switch. With the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door
handles and cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Overhead Console
Interior Lights Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off position.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Mist Feature
CAUTION!
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind- mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in continue to operate until you release the multifunction
any position other than off. lever. 3
Intermittent Wiper System NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc- spray the windshield with washer fluid.
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the Windshield Washers
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
washer spray is desired.
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
and then resume the intermittent interval previously Automatic Headlights Only)
selected. When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
and then turn off. position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
WARNING! feature.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
could lead to a collision. You might not see other disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
windshield with the defroster before and during further information.
windshield washer use.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. 3
steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
WARNING!
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired You could lose control and have an accident. Always 3
vehicle set speed. leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be operate at the selected speed.
turned off when not in use.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed continue to increase until the button is released, then
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) the new set speed will be established.
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
To Vary The Speed Setting 2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
To Increase Speed the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
the new set speed will be established.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Accelerate For Passing
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the 3
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph. vehicle set speed.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
the new set speed will be established. moderate hills is normal.
Metric Speed (km/h) On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
WARNING!
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the changed to the ON/RUN position.
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF 10 mph (16 km/h).
EQUIPPED
ParkSense® Sensors
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys- within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
tem Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in
recommendations. (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro-
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- 3
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instru-
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Park Assist Ready
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System Off Slow Tone

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Fast Tone Continuous Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The
following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance Greater than 59-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 59 in (150 cm) (150-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow
(Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing
Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the System
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC. During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea- ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙SERVICE PARK 3
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds. Refer to
further information. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
display the ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ or ⬙WIPE
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
OFF REAR SENSORS⬙ message for as long as the vehicle
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
not operate.
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in If ⬙WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS⬙appears in the Electronic
REVERSE. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer. affect the performance of ParkSense®.
If ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ appears in the • When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instru-
EVIC, see an authorized dealer. ment cluster will display ⬙PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF⬙ for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam- • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
age the sensors. position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE: • ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, sounding a tone.
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
ating properly.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
CAUTION!
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
Failure to do so can result in the system not working recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide detected at all. Obstacles located above or below 3
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ the sensors will not be detected when they are in
bumper. close proximity.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
30 cm from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK using ParkSense®.
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
Courtesy/Reading Lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) button and a power sunroof switch may At the forward end of the overhead console are two
also be included, if equipped. courtesy/reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) console designate the three different HomeLink® chan-
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is nels.
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
3
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
HomeLink® Buttons
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
battery. rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® NOTE:
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming. programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of erase channels when programming additional buttons.
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manu-
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The Electronic identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display “CLEAR- where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
ING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
displays “CHANNELS CLEARED.” open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand - held
transmitter button. 3
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN-
NEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
Training The Garage Door Opener • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
1 — Door Opener
for the channel to train.
2 — Training Button • If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices follow these steps:
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed. the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
release the button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
seconds each time). The EVIC will display “CHAN- ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
NEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device steps.
activates, programming is complete. Programming A Non-Rolling Code
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to before 1995.
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If
program. the garage door opener/device activates, program-
ming is complete.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand - held To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
transmitter button. repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT 3
erase the channels.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
NEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
NOTE: follow these steps:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
for the channel to train. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
Step 2. not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States button while you press and release (“cycle”), your
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after hand - held transmitter every two seconds.
several seconds of transmission. 4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- NEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® NOTE:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
for the channel to train.
time-out in the same manner.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
Step 2.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor. 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If
the device is plugged in and activates, programming is
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 complete.
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
program. programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button Security
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps: in your vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display 3
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
“CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when
release the button. the EVIC displays “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, press and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- ter.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
WARNING!
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and Your motorized door or gate will open and close
remember to plug it back in? while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
WARNING! door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
serious injury or death. assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
2. This device must accept any interference that may be The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
received including interference that may cause unde- visors on the overhead console.
sired operation.
NOTE: 3
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location object, to project through the sunroof opening.
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of Injury may result.
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in Opening Sunroof — Express
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
by the power sunroof while operating the power second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
serious injury or death. open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured. To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
(Continued)
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Closing Sunroof — Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half 3
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof. a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the Press and release the Vent button within one half second
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
forward again. movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open. For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
Wind Buffeting Information Center (EVIC)
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the position. Opening either front door will cancel this
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain feature.
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
minimize the buffeting or open any window. will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
CAUTION!
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse. • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position. will need to be replaced. 3
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be only. Do not insert any other object in the power
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position. fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® cigar damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
knob and element must be used. Warranty.
Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet

The center console power outlet is powered directly from Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the
the battery (power available at all times). battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands. 3
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — #18 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #9 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in only. Do not insert any other object in the power
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or damage not covered by your warranty.
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped
Front Cupholders The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They
are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
3
Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el-
bows.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders Sliding Console Armrest

CONSOLE FEATURES Console Storage
Sliding Center Console Armrest The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt
The center console armrest slides forward with three
power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use
various size coins). The center console may also be
and shifting ease.
equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and
WARNING!
iPhone® devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instru- Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment Panel” for further information. ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision. 3
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on

the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
Center Console rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .208 ▫ Sport Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped . .230
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .210 ▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 ▫ Compass Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . .225 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .225
䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .260
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .260
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .240
▫ Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .265
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .248 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .249 ▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .249 ▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .271 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .276
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .276
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF ▫ Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 4
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlets 6 — ESC OFF Switch 11 — Ignition Switch

2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Sport Button 12 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Glove Compartment 8 — Hazard Warning Switch 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Radio 9 — Heated Steering Wheel Switch
5 — Heated Seat Switch 10 — Climate Control
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
1. Fuel Gauge This light will turn on when the electronic
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when speed control is on.
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
2. Trip Odometer Button 5. Tachometer
Press this button to change the display from odometer to The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B” engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer area.
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to 6. Charging System Warning Light
reset it.
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
3. Speedometer ing system. The light should turn on when the
Indicates vehicle speed. ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on,
it means that the charging system is experiencing a vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain rized dealer for service as soon as possible.
service immediately. If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting immediate service is required. In this case, you may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if 4
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
the light does not come on during starting.
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position. This light will also turn on while 8. Temperature Gauge
the engine is running if there is a problem with the
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
place the shift lever in PARK, for manual transmission
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
place the transmission in neutral, apply the parking
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
brake, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
9. Turn Signal Indicators
CAUTION!
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
when the turn signal lever is operated.
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle NOTE:
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
engine OFF immediately and call for service. signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
WARNING! indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or 10. Air Bag Warning Light
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle” either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- 12. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Vehicle” for further information.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine 4
When this light turns on, the engine temperature is
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
critically hot. Further overheating will cause a continu-
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
ous chime will sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
allowed to cool. If the light turns on while driving, safely
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos-
problem diagnosed and corrected.
sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information).
NOTE: 13. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Light — If Equipped
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned trol (ESC) is off.
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the 14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously. This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the chime will sound when this light turns on.
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
15. High Beam Indicator 17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission
Only
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
high beam. automatic transmission.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light 18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as This indicator will illuminate when the front fog 4
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first lights are on.
placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the 19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The
(EVIC) Display Area
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Re- hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve- vidual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for
hicle” for further information. additional information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans- 20. Brake Warning Light
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
This light monitors various brake functions,
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
including brake fluid level and parking brake
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
application. If the brake light turns on it may
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
the odometer must be reset at zero. remain on until the condition has been corrected.
The EVIC features a driver-interactive display, for further The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
information refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
ter (EVIC)”. system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
the brake fluid level checked. ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary. 4
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger- applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will tion.
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
until the vehicle is disarmed.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
tires.) operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety placement equipment that is not of the same size,
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a 4
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly. This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
CAUTION! switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
warning have been established for the tire size then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
(Continued)
functioning and service is required. However, the con- start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
if the BRAKE warning light is not on. promptly.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
the light inspected by an authorized dealer. most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will CAUTION!
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
OBD system monitors engine and automatic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when Immediate service is required.
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
WARNING!
(EVIC)
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal tures a driver-interactive display which is located in the
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you instrument cluster.
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or 4
others.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a • Surround Sound Modes (if equipped with Driver-
variety of useful information by pressing the switches Selectable Surround [DSS])
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
The system allows the driver to select information by
following:
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
• System Status wheel:
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect® phone (If Equipped)
• Uconnect® gps Screens (If Equipped)
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
• Audio Mode Display
MENU Button SELECT Button
Press and release the MENU button to access Press and release the SELECT button for access
the main menu, or to return to the main menu to main menus, sub-menus or to select a per-
from the sub-menus. sonal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
UP Button
features.
Press and release the UP button to scroll up-
ward through the main menus and sub-menus.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 4
Displays
DOWN Button
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll the following messages:
downward through the main menus and • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
sub-menus. the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single • Channels Cleared
chime)
• Did Not Train
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
• Service TPM System (with a single chime)
• Door Ajar
• Tire Pressure Display Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in Tire to XX”
motion)
• ESC Off – Electronic Stability Control is deactivated
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
• Oil Change Required
• Check Gascap
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Key Fob Battery Low
• Channel # Transmit
• Service Keyless System
• Channel # Training
• Wrong Key
• Channel # Trained
• Damaged Key
• Clearing Channels
• Key not Programmed has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consump-
• Vehicle Not in Park
tion.
• Key Fob Not Detected When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
• Press Brake & Push Button to Start the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
• Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the
“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower 4
Starting Your Vehicle”) gear.
• 1–4 SKIPSHIFT The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until
the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped to a situation where changing gear is not required to
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on improve fuel consumption.
vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle Engine Oil Change Indicator System
with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode.
The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication Oil Change Required
within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change within 10 seconds.
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
upon your personal driving style.
OFF/LOCK position.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the not start the engine.)
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but-
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
within 10 seconds.
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™ NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
Trip Functions • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode — If
Press and release the MENU button until one of the Equipped
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC: • Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
• Distance To Empty history information will be erased, and the averaging
• Trip A will continue from the last fuel average reading before
the reset. 4
• Trip B
• The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above
• Elapsed Time the average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This
message will appear whenever the Multi-
• Display Units of Measure in
Displacement System (MDS) (if equipped) allows the
Press the UP or DOWN buttons to cycle through all the engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are
Trip Computer functions. driving in a fuel efficient manner.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
Fuel Saver Mode–On Fuel Saver Mode–Off

• This feature allows you to monitor when you are • Distance To Empty (DTE)
driving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to
• Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance
economy.
is determined by a weighted average of the instanta- • Trip B
neous and average fuel economy, according to the
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through
reset.
the SELECT button.
• Elapsed Time
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON 4
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) or START position.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display • Display Units of Measure in
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display. To Reset The Display
• Trip A Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
reset. resettable functions, press and release the SELECT button
a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window.)
Sport Mode
This light will illuminate when the sport mode

is selected. This mode provides performance
based tuning. For further information, refer to
”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N- The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
Go™ icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
showing the new ignition switch position. switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper- Mode will only be available for video media sources
ating” for more information. (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media supported by
the radio).
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But Compass Display — If Equipped
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display MENU Button
always re-appears.
The compass readings indicate the direction
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — If the vehicle is facing. Press and release the 4
Equipped MENU button until “Compass” displays in the
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround EVIC.
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
mation on the current surround mode.
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
• Stereo be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
• Surround Sound
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the SELECT are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
button to change surround modes. The Video Surround
Automatic Compass Calibration 3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “CALIBRATE
COMPASS” displays in the EVIC.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may EVIC.
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
“CAL” message turns off. The compass will now
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
Settings displays in the EVIC. differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
Settings displays in the EVIC.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings. 3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “COMPASS
VARIANCE” message and the last variance zone
number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper 4
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the MENU button to exit.
Compass Variance Map

System Warnings (Customer Information Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the Up or features when the transmission is in PARK.
DOWN button to display any one of the following Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
choices.
tings displays in the EVIC.
• Oil Temperature
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
Shows the actual oil temperature. following choices.
• Oil Pressure Language
Shows the actual oil pressure. When in this display you may select one of three lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
• Tire Pressure
functions and the Uconnect® gps (if equipped). Press the
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING SELECT button while in this display to select English,
THE SPARE TIRE). Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the informa-
tion will display in the selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect® lan-
guage selection.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h) transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of
When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-
When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to 4
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
make your selection, press and release the SELECT grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
Remote Key Unlock grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
Remote Start Comfort Sys. Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected and the remote start is When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
These features will stay on through the duration of SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make feature showing the system has been activated or the
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until check-mark is removed showing the system has been
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the deactivated.
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
showing the system has been deactivated.
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press “ON” or “OFF” appears.
and release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available With Auto when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
Headlamps Only) and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or
“90” appears.
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approxi- Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
Operating” for system function and operating informa- 4
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
Features Of Your Vehicle.” and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
Delay Turning Headlights Off
tion, press and release the SELECT button until “OFF,”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Delay Power Off To Accessories Until Exit Display ECO Mode — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the power window The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), power Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out- off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
min.” appears. or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig- been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, IF EQUIPPED
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To Refer to your Uconnect® 730N, 430 or 430N user’s
make your selection, press and release the SELECT manual for detailed operating instructions.
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
is removed showing the system has been deactivated. — If Equipped
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding Refer to “Voice Command” for further details. 4
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information. Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Display Units Of Measure In
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
Uconnect® 130 Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
position to operate the radio. will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
RW/FF
TIME Button
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
and radio frequency. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control 4
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will begin to blink. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob to save time change.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory
treble tones. When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
sound level from the right or left side speakers. this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM MP3 Audio Play
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
NOTE:
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice. • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact 4
Buttons 1 - 6
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
stations).
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
DISC Button
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
AM/FM modes to Disc modes. radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
show the track number, and index time in minutes and other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
away and jam the player mechanism.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
(Continued) NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
CD and MP3 modes. change of pace. 4
TIME Button Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) file recording media and formats are limited. When
button operates in a similar manner. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) play.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
When reading discs recorded using formats other than character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
character extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8 CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-
Bit Rate (kbps)
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- cation quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is Layer 3 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
4
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit 56, 48, 40, 32,
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 24, 16, 8
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rate. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files. Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
by the following: allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
system to amplify the source and play through the
CD-R media
vehicle speakers.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
to load than non-multisession discs auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
increase with more files and folders device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is ACC position to operate the radio.
OFF).
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio. 4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130
SEEK Buttons If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make TIME Button
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
stations without stopping, until you release it.
and radio frequency.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Clock Setting Procedure
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
details. SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ RW/FF
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
trol knob to save time change. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise 4
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
procedure, starting at step 2. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
INFO Button will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones. Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ format types:
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers. 16-Digit Character
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No program type or un- None
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
defined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers. Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade. Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
MUSIC TYPE Button
Country Country
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Foreign Language Language
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
16-Digit Character 16-Digit Character

Program Type Program Type
Display Display
Information Inform Sports Sports
Jazz Jazz Talk Talk
News News Top 40 Top 40
Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather
Oldies Oldies By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
4
Personality Persnlty is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Public Public station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Rhythm and Blues R&B Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Rock Rock (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
SETUP Button button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory.
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL con-
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
save time change.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. pressing the pushbutton twice.
SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Memory button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Buttons 1 - 6 Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations). the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode. If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio 4
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
MP3 Audio Play begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
NOTE: seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio. CAUTION!
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and CD player mechanism.
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
(Continued)
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
away and jam the player mechanism. convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not SEEK Button
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded. Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
cause damage to the player. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW/FF Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or file recording media and formats are limited. When
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
works in a similar manner. tions.
AM/FM Button Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are 4
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on theThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
domly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis- extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
play.) designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
character extension) an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension) use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre- Playback Of MP3 Files

Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224, radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
Layer 3 192, 160, 128, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
112, 96, 80, 64, time to start playing the MP3 files.
56, 48, 40, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144, by the following:
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
4
56, 48, 40, 32, • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
24, 16, 8 CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios. • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a time⬙ priority mode.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
before writing to the disc. more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
playable files). system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
down.
limited coverage in Alaska.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
System Activation
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The 4
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
ignition is OFF).
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
Equipped come kit that contains general information, including
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details. how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
Equipped www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Selecting Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Number (ESN/SID) Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Please have the following information available when CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
calling: mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
Number (ESN/SID). To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
ESN/SID Access bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
on or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Quality
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons:
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen. • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
form of short audio mutes. selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception. SCAN Button
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause signal blockage. the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN 4
Operating Instructions — Uconnect® Multimedia
button a second time.
(Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio. Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
SEEK Buttons able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next additional three seconds will make the radio display the
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will to normal display).
RW/FF By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
TUNE Control (Rotary)
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. SETUP Button
MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
seconds will allow the program format type to be se- number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
lected. Sirius subscription.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music

type.
SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be 4
stored into pushbutton memory. This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by or glove compartment.
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 visit Apple’s website for software updates.
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
which is located in the center console or glove compart-
ment.
NOTE: The center console will have a position where the NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
routed through without damaging the cable when clos- MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
ing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
routed may be located in the base of the center console on MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
Using This Feature
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to 4
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the connect to the USB port:
lid to close without damaging the cable. • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or etc.) information on the radio display.
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
pressing radio switches, as described below.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Using Radio Buttons playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/ VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
Play Mode long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the track.
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio holding the FF>> button.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
USB device and display data: • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or onds.
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
Track.⬙ and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press ⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio 4
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio List Or Browse Mode
device mode to repeat the current playing track or During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
Off.⬙ scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de- audio device.
vice scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise • Preset 2 – Artists
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
• Preset 3 – Albums
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the • Preset 4 – Genres
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay • Preset 6 – Podcasts
in updating the information on the radio display may
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
be noticeable.
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in second line.
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclock-
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
wise) to get to the track faster.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or exter-
nal USB device: • Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This
• Preset 1 – Playlists
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
WARNING!
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system. Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your could result in an accident.
audio device. Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
CAUTION! Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 4

Uconnect® phone system.
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex- Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam- To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream-
guidelines. ing Audio.”
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
Play Mode
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
and/or to the connectors. start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect® Previous Track
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
and played. previous music track on your cellular phone.
Selecting A Different Audio Device Browse
1. Press the PHONE button to begin. Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙ playing will display info.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices. PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
Next Track SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
track on your cellular phone.
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver- AUX input; and is activated through Uconnect® radio
ing substantial increases in component and system effi- touchscreen. Refer to “Customer Programmable Fea-
ciency levels. tures” under “Uconnect® SETTINGS” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel”.
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge™ high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power Selecting “Surround Sound” through the Uconnect®
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. radio activates the Harman Kardon® Logic7® multichan-
The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to nel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source. audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo 4
The GreenEdge™ high-efficiency speaker designs ensure mode.
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in
When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set auto-
dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
matically. Fader control is available in surround mode
maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the ampli-
but should be set to the center position for optimal
fier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
surround performance.
surround sound processing.
Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology deliv-
ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
EQUIPPED push-button in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
Wheel) will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton. precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the 4
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the ing the disc.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no or anti-static sprays.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular CLIMATE CONTROLS
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
good disc before considering disc player service. cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
Automatic Temperature Control

Automatic Operation You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
Operation of the system is quite simple.
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
Turn the Mode Control knob (right knob) and the Blower system completely and closes the outside air intake.
Control knob (left knob) to AUTO.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
occupants only.
NOTE: 4
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
Dial in the temperature you would without affecting automatic operation.
like the system to maintain by rotating
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
the Temperature Control knob (center
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
knob). Once the comfort level is se-
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
lected, the system will maintain that
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
level automatically using the heating
air conditioning is not necessary.
system. Should the desired comfort
level require air conditioning, the system will automati- • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
cally make the adjustment. expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind Manual Operation
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front This system offers a full complement of manual override
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
reducing air conditioning performance. Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
Blower Control ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
For full automatic operation or for
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
automatic blower operation, turn the
rotating the Blower Control knob (left knob).
blower knob to the AUTO position. In
manual mode there are seven blower NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
speeds that can be individual selected. Operation Chart that follows for details.
In off position the blower will shut off.
4
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (right knob) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and
• Panel side window demist outlets.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. • Mix
These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed window demist outlets. This setting works best in
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
for maximum airflow to the rear. windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
• Bi-Level while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
there is a difference in temperature between the upper
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor
shield and side window defrosting.
outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during
sunny but cool conditions.
• Air Conditioner Control NOTE:
Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
conditioning during manual operation position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
only. When the air conditioning is • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with mode is not allowed in defrost mode in order to
the Mode control dial. Press this but- improve window clearing. Recirculation will be dis-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air abled automatically if these modes are selected.
4
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected. • Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
• Recirculation Control press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
The system will automatically control recircu- Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Control button will put the system in recircu-
Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
lation mode. This can be used when outside
Attempting to use the recirculation while in defrost
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in and then turn off.
the control button to illuminate.
Operating Tips Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
tions. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
Window Fogging
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
Winter Operation
rainy or humid weather.
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
is not recommended because it may cause window
long periods as fogging may occur.
fogging.
Side Window Demisters A/C Air Filter
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
air toward the side windows when the system is in the outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
the area of the windows through which you view the in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
outside mirrors. information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service inter- 4
Outside Air Intake
vals.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions While In Manual Override
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .299
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .290 ▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .291 ▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped . . . . . . .292 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 5
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 ▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Extreme Cold Weather ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .299 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .306
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .306 䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .322
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .322
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .327
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .327
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .331
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .343
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .359 5
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .348
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .361
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .362
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .351
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . .372 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . .373 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .379
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .374 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .378
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .393
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if in a location accessible to children), and do not
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
belts. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
WARNING! controls, or move the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni-
number of reasons. A child or others could be tion system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be pressed to the floor.
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal Normal Starting With Integrated Key — Manual
or the shift lever. Transmission
(Continued) Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
ignition switch to the START position and release when The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, before shifting into any driving gear.
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
CAUTION!
WARNING! Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con-
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL 5
into any forward gear when the engine is above
verter and once the engine has started, ignite and
idle speed.
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
a complete stop.
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
idle speed.
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further informa-
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
tion.
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the This feature allows the driver to oper-
accelerator pedal. ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
START/STOP button is installed and
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
Go™ Key Fob is in the passenger
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
compartment.
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 Installing And Removing The ENGINE
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the START/STOP Button
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat Installing The Button
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and read-
able.
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
position. ENGINE START/STOP button once.
Removing The Button 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
the engine starting, press the button again.
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry
the button loose. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the 5
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
accelerator pedal.
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Manual Transmission Only
Normal Starting
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Automatic Transmission Only
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the
Starting” procedure. engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
the engine starting, release the button.
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “VEHICLE NOT IN
accelerator pedal. PARK” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
could roll.
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE NOTE:
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
Only
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE position.
START/STOP button.
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then
apply the parking brake.
the engine is not running. 5
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions — With Driver’s 4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
Or NEUTRAL Position) displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
steps:
If Engine Fails To Start
1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to WARNING!
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”), • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position causing serious personal injury.
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
(Continued)
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it Only
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
could enter the catalytic converter and once the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and vehicle. and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then 5
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen- and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
cies” for further information. the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission Integrated Key)
Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
hold it.
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch as soon as the starter engages.
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
Starting” procedure.
seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
CAUTION!
Module.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again. WARNING!
After Starting Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will electrical cord could cause electrocution.
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED 5

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits Six-Speed Manual Transmission
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one vehicle unattended without having the parking
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
especially on an incline.
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
CAUTION!
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch warms up. This is normal.
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Start-
ing And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchro-
nizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur. Manual Shifter
Shifting The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting. CAUTION!
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so 5
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you may result in transmission damage.
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
from a standing position.
Recommended Shift Speeds NOTE:
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel • Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recom- inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
mended shift speed chart. 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
SHIFT SPEEDS the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position
Axle 1-4 4-5 5-6 for Keyless Enter-N-Go™), as compared to the ignition
Ratio LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-
3.73 mph 20 25 42 Go™). This is normal operation of the transmission
(km/h) (32) (40) (67) reverse inhibitor system.
3.91 mph 20 37 48 • Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
(km/h) (32) (59) (77) you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy. may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis- When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is dis-
sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an played, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from
indication of a problem with your clutch or transmis- first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission
sion. to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to
another forward gear.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission Downshifting
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs grade. 5
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) WARNING!
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less. Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
during these times. could have a collision.

• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch. idle speed.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
damage the engine and/or clutch. speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
CAUTION! shifting out of PARK.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) posi- the engine is idling normally and your foot is
tion, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing firmly pressing the brake pedal. 5
the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
(Continued)
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
• Children should be warned not to touch the park- This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
ing brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
in a location accessible to children), and do not out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™ in the ACC or ON/RUN pedal must be pressed.
mode. A child could operate power windows, other Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
controls, or move the vehicle.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
Key Ignition Park Interlock instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
(key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed
from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
position, and the transmission is locked in PARK when- precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
ever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position. self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can 5
be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or Shift Lever
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles Gear Ranges
(-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
brake.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
OFF position first.
grade.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the WARNING!
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
vehicle in this range. ment and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
PARK before leaving the vehicle. parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL turn the engine off, and remove the key fob. When
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) posi-
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the tion, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing 5
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- the vehicle against unwanted movement.
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
someone or something. Only shift into gear when fob and lock your vehicle.
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
number of reasons. A child or others could be the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be lever could result.
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
or the shift lever. PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or can damage the drivetrain.
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N- The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
operate power windows, other controls, or move tion:
the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
WARNING!
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
will not move out of PARK. ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
REVERSE (R) or road conditions. You might lose control of the
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into vehicle and have a collision.
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop. CAUTION!
5
NEUTRAL (N) Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
periods with the engine running. The engine may be severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D) SPORT — If Equipped
This range should be used for most city and highway This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission creased to make full use of available engine power.
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
To toggle between normal mode and SPORT mode, press
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
the SPORT switch on the instrument panel.
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions. Transmission Limp Home Mode
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as Transmission function is monitored electronically for
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi- After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will con-
and heat buildup. tinue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
damaging the transmission. earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps: If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Overdrive Operation
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically 5
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
5. Restart the engine.
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
operation. • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
AUTOSTICK® AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When
AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode,
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
system can also provide you with more control during
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
sen, except as described below.
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
Operation transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the mum engine speed is reached.
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply transmission will remain in the selected gear even
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the
when maximum engine speed is reached. The trans-
DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheel- mission will upshift only when commanded by the
mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to driver. Engine overspeed protection will be provided
enter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission
by fuel cut off at or near redline.
to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
display the current gear. until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
pedal.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
WARNING!
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
5
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions. grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is en-
gaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift Acceleration
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
creased to make full use of available engine power. On
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
the center console, there is a “SPORT” button that when
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
pressed the vehicle will enter “SPORT” mode.
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
SPORT Button
Traction Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-
proved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed: Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
5
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become WARNING!
visible.
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
4. Keep tires properly inflated. water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
sudden stop.
(Continued)

carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this • Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
warning may result in injuries that are serious or cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
Shallow Standing Water brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through • Failure to follow these warnings may result in
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
and Warnings before doing so. sengers, and others around you.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- • Always check the depth of the standing water
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph before driving through it. Never drive through
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

• Determine the condition of the road or the path • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
the way before driving through the standing water. internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects. POWER STEERING
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always 5
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
(Continued)
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
CAUTION!
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri- You will lose power steering assistance momentarily
cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering until the over temperature condition no longer exists.
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let
Normal operation will resume once the system is vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
allowed to cool. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Un-
tion.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”
message and a flashing icon are displayed on NOTE:
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle • Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Under- steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. and during parking maneuvers.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP - SEE • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
OWNER’S MANUAL” message and an icon are dis- service.
played on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY NOTE:
— IF EQUIPPED
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
driver inputs or additional driving skills required. before attempting to move the vehicle.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full • This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
functionality after a battery disconnect. plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
PARKING BRAKE When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front 5

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position. before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
Enter-N-Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru- brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
ment cluster will illuminate. not in the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake


• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake in a location accessible to children), and do not
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
ment and possible injury or damage. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key mode. A child could operate power windows, other
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. controls, or move the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake 5
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a failure and a collision.
number of reasons. A child or others could be • Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
or the shift lever. PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
CAUTION!
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an with the power system operating.
authorized dealer immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic wheel lock-up.
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
by increased pedal travel during application, greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential axle.
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.” When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per- These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so-
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus-
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in- ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose stalled or high output radio transmitting
debris, or panic stops. equipment. This interference can cause possible
You also may experience the following when the brake loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
5
system goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a professionals.
short time after the stop) • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
• Brake pedal pulsations press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop (Continued)
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. the ON position and may stay on for as long as four
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent seconds.
collisions, including those resulting from excessive If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
speed in turns, following another vehicle too while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
closely, or hydroplaning. brake system is not functioning and that service is
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System required. However, the conventional brake system will
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopar- Light” is not on.
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
accurate signals for the computer.
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
possible. under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
required. Operating” for further information.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM WARNING!

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics 5
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those result-
System), and the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). These ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
and control in various driving conditions. an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on all models.
Traction Control System (TCS) Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli-
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” or ⬙Full Off⬙ unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this is released, the BAS is deactivated.
section for more information.
during this short period of time, the system will release
WARNING!
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics system will release brake pressure in proportion to
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The the intended direction of travel.
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re- HSA Activation Criteria
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa- The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be activate:
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that • Vehicle must be stopped. 5
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. • Vehicle must be on a 3% (approximate) for manual
transmission and 6% (approximate) for automatic
Hill Start Assist (HSA) transmissions.
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
WARNING!
following steps:
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system seconds.
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak- straight forward).
ing the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Disabling/Enabling HSA 3. Apply the parking brake.
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be 4. Start the engine.
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to 5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un- 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
tion. 7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times
within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
additional half-turn to the right. that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
pleted properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
dicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than 5
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of WARNING!
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
maintain the desired path.
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
all accidents, including those resulting from exces- The ESC system has two or three available operating
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, modes:
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents ESC On
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must mode. This mode should be used for most driving
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
of others. Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the switch bank near
WARNING!
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
switch and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light⬙ will illuminate. except for the limited wheel spin feature described in
To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Off” switch and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light⬙ will turn Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
off. tial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle stability offered
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving by the ESC system is reduced.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, Full Off — If Equipped
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the 5
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momen- this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
while the vehicle is in motion. “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the
vehicle odometer. The “ESC OFF” message may appear
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press or off-road use only.
the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
into the PARK position from any position other than If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
will occur when the message was previously cleared. and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
WARNING! when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
reduction and stability features are disabled. There- “ESC Off” switch.
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
(Continued)
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/ NOTE:
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the 5
ON/RUN position.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem cycled off previously.
diagnosed and corrected. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially Tire Markings
off or full off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load

Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE: tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with T145/80D18 103M.
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design 5
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
EXAMPLE:
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire 5
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
5
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the ve-
hicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
Pressure shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information

Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
Tire And Loading Information Placard gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
This placard tells you important information about the: axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. “Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
the weight referenced here. (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not 5
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
capacity calculated in step 4.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
• Safety lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
right or left. ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
mended cold tire inflation pressure. sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
erratic and unpredictable steering response. 5
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases vehicle to drift left or right.
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
Tire Inflation Pressures
tion.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month: mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated. temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which could damage the valve stem.
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. Tire Repair 5
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
WARNING! meets the following criteria:
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- • The tire has not been driven on when flat.
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the (sidewall damage is not repairable).
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above • The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
75 mph (120 km/h).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information. Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
service description (Load Index and Speed Code). driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be- adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
Snow Tires
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
handling of your vehicle. mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
safety and handling of your vehicle. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full 5
tire inflation pressures. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
CAUTION! You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And 80D18 103M.
Wheel — If Equipped
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time. your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
WARNING! first opportunity.
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency 5
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
WARNING!
Emergencies” for further information.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle WARNING!
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control. Tread Wear Indicators
Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure 5
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

2 — New Tire higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread tenance schedule is highly recommended.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
WARNING!
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
You could lose control and have a collision resulting manual for more information relating to the Load Index
in serious injury or death. and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline. affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
sion components. You could lose control and have
ings.
5
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
capacity, other than what was originally equipped clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load against damage.
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
You could lose control and have a collision.
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
(Continued)
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
CAUTION!
• Due to limited clearance, P235/55R18 or P225/60R18
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6
following precautions:
low profile traction device or equivalent is recom-
mended. • Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
WARNING!
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
handling. You could lose control and have a collision. the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- smooth, quiet ride.
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
suggested operating speed of the device manufac- maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern 5
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving, reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure. the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn- (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu- a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will auto- Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
matically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. “TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the 5
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
this information. sure value.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and or condition.
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op- • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
eration or sensor damage may result when using while adjusting your tire pressure.
replacement equipment that is not of the same size, • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after- stopping ability.
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
sensor function checked. nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light.”
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire. The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
Base System instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE” message will
be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
readings to the receiver module.
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire 5
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the pressures, the system will automatically update and the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly “TPM Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn
and to maintain the proper pressure. off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
The TPMS consists of the following components: minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light
Service TPMS Warning 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will Vehicles with Compact Spare
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
system fault can occur due to any of the following: tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
will sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors. and a “LOW TIRE” message will be displayed for a
minimum of five seconds.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
materials that may block radio wave signals.
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
wheel housings.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and The TPMS consists of the following components:
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
• Receiver module,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn • Four TPM sensors,
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the • TPM Telltale Light
TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
Premium System — If Equipped 5
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE”
readings to the receiver module. message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. An
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed in the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
EVIC display.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-
Tire Pressure Monitor Display -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible is not being received.
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as
shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or 5
wheel housings.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres- 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed. then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Vehicles with Compact Spare 4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
the compact spare tire.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road in place of the pressure value.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
display a flashing pressure value and the ⬙Inflate Tire
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of
to XX⬙ message.
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active FUEL REQUIREMENTS
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
General Information sions regulations and provide excellent
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and fuel economy and performance when us-
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
following conditions: line having an octane rating of 87. The use
• This device may not cause harmful interference. of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not 5
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
• This device must accept any interference received, engines.
eration. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
ing licenses: required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
United States MRXC4W4MA4 ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4 before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties these engines.
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci- high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
fications if they are available. required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
The 3.6L and 5.7L engine (with automatic
transmission) is designed to meet all emis- Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
sions regulations and provide satisfactory endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
fuel economy and performance when us- Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recom- and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
The 5.7L engine (with manual transmis- genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
sion) is designed to meet all emissions ates are required in some areas of the country during the
regulations and provide excellent fuel winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
economy and performance when using Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline your vehicle.
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
CAUTION!
Reformulated Gasoline 5
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner Do not use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” these blends may result in starting and drivability
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe- problems and may damage critical fuel system com-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- ponents.
prove air quality.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso- E-85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro- manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and methanol, it does not have the negative effects of metha-
fuel system components. nol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles • Change the engine oil and oil filter.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher engine controller memory.
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Operate in a lean mode.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• Poor engine performance.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• Poor cold start and cold drivability. MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following: of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline. • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
Materials Added To Fuel mance and damage the emissions control system.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
conditions and they would result in additional cost. some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser- 5
fuel. vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
Fuel System Cautions • The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
CAUTION! Most of these products contain high concentrations
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
performance: mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
(Continued) manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
Carbon Monoxide Warnings time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
WARNING! conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. • Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
monoxide poisoning: haust gases from entering the vehicle.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can ADDING FUEL
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
is stopped in an open area with the engine running left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. cap is for use with this vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top 5
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
WARNING!
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
running. filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a ”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
could be burned. Always place gas containers on Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
the ground while filling. occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
NOTE: problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is mation.
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
VEHICLE LOADING • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information • Type of Vehicle
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated. • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
5
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Name of manufacturer
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
• Month and year of manufacture
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
WARNING!
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is evenly over the front and rear axles.
important that you do not exceed the maximum front Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
control of the vehicle and have a collision. GVWR.
Overloading Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
front and rear GAWR. evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
it is not over the GVWR. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed Common Towing Definitions
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
and GAWRs. you in understanding the following information:
TRAILER TOWING Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
In this section, you will find safety tips and information The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
review this information to tow your load as efficiently exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
and safely as possible. Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for 5
further information.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
hicles used for trailer towing. The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination. hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
part of the load on your vehicle.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Frontal Area
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- maximum width of the front of a trailer.
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Trailer Sway Control
information.
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
WARNING! link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight-Carrying Hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Dis-
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and tribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of 5
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever- • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used system may reduce handling, stability, braking
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the performance, and could result in a collision.
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- (Continued)
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
WARNING! (Continued) Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible Class Max. Trailer Hitch In-
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch dustry Standards
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Vehicle dealer for additional information. Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Duty
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Max. GTW (Gross

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. Tongue Wt.
Trailer Wt.)
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. 5
Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in your bumper or trailer hitch.
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: CAUTION!
• The tongue weight of the trailer. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
put in or on your vehicle. or other parts could be damaged.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
the heavier loads. suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
WARNING! vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. 5
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as enough slack for turning corners.
possible: • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
that may be difficult for the driver to control. You the trailer wheels.
could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. • GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued) (Continued)
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
ratings are not exceeded: sures before trailer usage.
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
Information” placard. before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
2. GTW
proper inspection procedure.
3. GAWR
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti- mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
lized. tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
Towing Requirements — Tires vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
This could cause inadequate braking and possible hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
personal injury. system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is collision.
required when towing a trailer with electronically • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle 5
brake controller is not required. in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over collision.
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
(Continued)
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
Four-Pin Connector
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
wiring harness. 2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the 5
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
4 — Electric Brakes provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans- “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Cooling System
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
you can get back to cruising speed. heating, take the following actions:
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to City Driving
maximize fuel efficiency. When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
AutoStick® into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the Highway Driving
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
Reduce speed.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Wheels OFF The

Towing Condition Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Ground 5
Flat Tow None • Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
NOT ALLOWED
• 65 mph (105 km/h)
maximum speed
Dolly Tow Front Not Recommended NOT ALLOWED
Rear Not Recommended Not Recommended
On Trailer All OK OK
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for tow- Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
CAUTION!
Vehicles with a manual transmission may be flat towed
(with all four wheels on the ground) under the following Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
conditions: ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The towing speed must not exceed 65 mph
(105 km/h).
• There is no limitation on towing distance. 5
Manual transmission vehicles may also be towed using a
vehicle trailer (with all four wheels off the ground).
Use of a towing dolly is not recommended, as vehicle
damage may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .399 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .399 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .413
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 ▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .401 ▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 6
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
panel.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direction.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down 6
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
WARNING!
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system. You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
CAUTION! you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
engine off immediately and call for service. nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
6
TIREFIT Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
TIREFIT Location 2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of TIREFIT Kit)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
to indicate the air or sealant mode. turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Selecting Air Mode Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and TIREFIT Usage Precautions
turn to this position to inject the TIRE- • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
selecting this mode. optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose 6
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
tire application use and need to be replaced after each sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in-
use. Always replace these components immediately at tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
your original equipment vehicle dealer. in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the • Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the source.
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
the TIREFIT kit. or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
following circumstances: provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
1/4” (6 mm) or larger. your passengers, and others around you.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage. • Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
– If the tire has any damage from driving with come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE-
extremely low tire pressure. FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tire. tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
– If the wheel has any damage. water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
the wheel. contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of to place the valve stem in this position before proceed-
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician ing.
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. tion.
4. Set the parking brake.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the 6
Sealant Mode position.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the deflated tire.
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
nails) from the tire. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
Tire: and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE- On the TIREFIT kit.
FIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at 6
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
empty.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the (D) Drive Vehicle:
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve- distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
hicle.” exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
CAUTION! WARNING!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con- tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte- warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
(E) After Driving: If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing. inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position. opening.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem.
Volt outlet.
6
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance. service center.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos- that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace- the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
ment”. housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
using the TIREFIT service kit. of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
vehicle.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
of it accordingly. time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- properly calibrated torque wrench.
ing.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/

Bolt Size Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
Torque Patterns under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING! • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, on a jack.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
(Continued)
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire. 6
Opening The Access Panel
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Spare Tire Fastener Jack Fastener

4. Remove the spare tire. 6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WARNING!
3. Set the parking brake.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- 4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in sion) or 1st gear (manual transmission).
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire 5. Turn OFF the ignition.
repaired or replaced immediately.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
Preparations For Jacking opposite of the jacking position. For
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the example, if changing the right front
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery tire, block the left rear wheel.
areas. NOTE: Passengers should not remain
6
in the vehicle when the vehicle is
WARNING! being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
vehicle. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. careful of motor traffic.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
CAUTION!
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
Instructions for this vehicle. loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange. 6
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Jack Engagement Locations

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.

7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
6
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem Mounting Spare Tire
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE: 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a handle counterclockwise.
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. 10. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use proper lug nut torque.
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
“Starting And Operating” for additional warnings, of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its tightening down the fastener.
use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug WARNING!
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
WARNING! hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has repaired or replaced immediately.
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
seated against the wheel.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
lug nuts. If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
WARNING! another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack 6
result in personal injury. follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start Remote Battery Posts Locations

The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
engine compartment for jump-starting.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
WARNING!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by WARNING!
moving fan blades.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
could establish a ground connection and personal
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
injury could result.
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
WARNING!
6
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic result in personal injury or property damage due to
transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and battery explosion.
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
or the discharged vehicle. cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
Connecting The Jumper Cables ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the parts.
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis-
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
charged battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
negative (-) post of the booster battery. in the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
CAUTION!
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
the discharged battery. draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper plugged in long enough without engine operation,
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. starting.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle 6
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST least one minute after every five rocking-motion
GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the en-
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
gine.
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION! WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be- Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE (with even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
manual transmission), do not spin the wheels explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
may result. longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans- 6
mission shifting occurring).
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located to the right of
the shift lever).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
down.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The AUTOMATIC TRANS- MANUAL TRANSMIS-

Ground MISSION SION
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is oper- If transmission is oper-
able: able:
• Transmission in NEU- • Transmission in NEU-
TRAL TRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max • 65 mph (105 km/h)
speed max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max
6
distance
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT RECOMMENDED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
CAUTION!
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- • Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to attach to front or rear suspension components.
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding towing.
vehicles under tow must be observed. • The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN occur.
position, not the ACC position.
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- age from improper towing is not covered under the
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions: If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km). PARK for towing.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). 6
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
Manual Transmission
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis- damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 65 mph
(105 km/h).
• There is no limitation on towing distance.
If the transmission is not operable, then the only accept-
able method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .436 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .437 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .438 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
7
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
(If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .465
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .466
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped. . .485
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .489
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .492 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery 4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
Post)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Engine Oil Fill 7
Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
Post)
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as ”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
soon as possible. “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
the vehicle is started. serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the MIL.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
PROGRAMS your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
start this test over.
7
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing. position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
may then indicate that the system is now ready. operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself. services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you. “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION!
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If form repairs and service when necessary could
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
result in more costly repairs, damage to other 7
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
chanic.
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids fully warmed engine is shut off.
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter- Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
transmission, power steering or air conditioning. dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of engines.
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure. CAUTION!
Engine Oil Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or

loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine Change Engine Oil
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a tion.
fully warmed engine is shut off.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain months, whichever occurs first.
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
Engine Oil Selection
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range For best performance and maximum protection under all
on these engines. types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet 7
CAUTION! the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or

loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Identification Symbol MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
This symbol means that the oil has Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
been certified by the American temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Petroleum Institute (API). The starting and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
CAUTION! Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
should not be used.
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper-
ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem- Materials Added To Engine Oil
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tives.
tion.
Synthetic Engine Oils
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
7
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper- are followed.
ating” for further information.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
maintenance intervals.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
WARNING!
Engine Oil Filter
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
at every engine oil change. backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
Engine Oil Filter Selection cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil near the engine compartment before starting the
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the Battery Location
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine 7
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
diately with large amounts of water. battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
a booster battery or any other booster source with
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories Air Conditioner Maintenance
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling. For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
of each warm season. This service should include cleaning
should not be disconnected and should only be
of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
for further warranty information. carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant service be performed by authorized dealer or other
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. 7
should be done by an experienced technician.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
Filter Access Cover A/C Air Filter

3. Remove the used filter. 5. Close the filter access cover. 7
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals.
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, tions of salt or road film.
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after from a dry windshield.
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
components to ensure proper function. When performing the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha- petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
equipped).
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the WARNING!
residual water. Commercially available windshield washer solvents
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper must be exercised when filling or working around
blades clean. This will help blade performance. the washer solution.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system Exhaust System
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into 7
rating information can be found on most washer fluid the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
containers. system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep over materials that can burn. Such materials might
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
information.
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your against you.
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
resulting in possible damage to the converter and tions, should be obtained immediately.
vehicle. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in 7
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst motion.
damage. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
Cooling System do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
WARNING! pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, Coolant Checks
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
Keyless Enter-N-Go™). The fan is temperature months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
controlled and can start at any time the ignition applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
switch is in the ON position (RUN position for system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™). fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
(Continued) spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
leaks. reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing maintenance intervals.
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE- Selection Of Coolant
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling Adding Coolant
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
authorized dealer as soon as possible. allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
(Continued) miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform- (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS-12106.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- needed to be added to the system please contact your
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen- local authorized dealer.
7
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
WARNING!
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible. • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
Cooling System Pressure Cap cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
recovery bottle. prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any pressure cap while the system is hot or under
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in a month.
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
spills immediately.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be- from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
tween the ranges indicated on the bottle.
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
7
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
condenser clean.
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez- operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ing. ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
sions.
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Brake System
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS- In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protec- system components should be inspected periodically.
tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
nents. maintenance intervals.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
WARNING!
cause leaking in the system.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
possible brake damage. You would not have your full leak and a checkup may be needed.
braking capacity in an emergency.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
7
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
can severely damage your brake system and/or fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
impair its performance. The proper type of brake air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
reservoir. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
(Continued) spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate Fluid Level Check
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4
This could result in a collision. inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,
if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Flu-
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
(If Equipped) Vehicle” for further information.
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder CAUTION!
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu- Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration 7
Vehicle” for further information. in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Change Transmission Fluid
CAUTION!
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immedi-
ately. See your authorized dealer for service. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
maintenance intervals. shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
Selection Of Lubricant tions.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Special Additives
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this any special additives in the transmission.
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
be used.
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
adversely affect seals. with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo- If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
Vehicle Limited Warranty. age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Fluid And Filter Changes
require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the maintenance intervals. 7
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
check your transmission fluid level using special service
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
tools.
mission is disassembled for any reason.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
Rear Axle Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Fluid Level Check Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
ground will improve the accuracy of the fluid level graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
reading. passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
Change Axle Fluid underbody protection.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The following maintenance recommendations will enable
maintenance intervals. you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion? • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Stone and gravel impact. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap and tar. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. CAUTION!
Washing • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
7
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild scratch metal and painted surfaces.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
clear water. kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once packaged and sealed.
a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open. possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, match the color of your vehicle.
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
the owner. MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives Equipped
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New ner:
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
this is all that is required to maintain this finish. with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
CAUTION!
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
7
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
equivalent is recommended. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
WARNING!
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery. CAUTION!
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery damage to the seat may result.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth Cleaning Headlights
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- age than glass headlights.
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
required to maintain the original condition. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- directly on the mirror.
lowed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Glass Surfaces must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- rag.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
2. Dry with a soft cloth. 7
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may Seat Belt Maintenance
scratch the elements. Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft with the cupholder in the center console.
cloth.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly. FUSES
WARNING! WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
bing, etc.). age.
(Continued)
Integrated Power Module
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
is off and that all the other services are switched off compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Integrated Power Module


• When installing the integrated power module • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
allow water to get into the integrated power mod- result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
ule and possibly result in an electrical system a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
failure. a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description

1 — 15 Amp Blue Washer Motor
2 — 25 Amp Natural Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/NGS
Module Feed (Batt)
3 — 25 Amp Natural Ignition Run/Start
4 — 25 Amp Natural EGR Solenoid/Alternator
5 — 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module

6 — 25 Amp Natural Ignition Coils/Injectors
7 — 25 Amp Natural Headlamp Washer Relay – If Equipped
8 — 30 Amp Green Starter
9 — — —
10 30 Amp Pink — Windshield Wiper
11 30 Amp Pink — Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valves
12 40 Amp Green — Radiator Fan Lo/High
13 50 Amp Red — Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump Motor
14 — — —
15 50 Amp Red — Radiator Fan
16 — — —
7
17 — — —
18 — — —
19 — — —
20 — — —

21 — — —
22 — — —
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center


• When installing the power distribution center • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
allow water to get into the power distribution result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
center and possibly result in an electrical system a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
failure. a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)

1 60 Amp Yellow — Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear Power Distribution
7
Center contains a black IOD fuse needed
for vehicle processing during assembly.
The service replacement part is a 60 Amp
yellow cartridge fuse.
2 40 Amp Green — Integrated Power Module (IPM)

3 — — —
4 40 Amp Green — Integrated Power Module (IPM)
5 30 Amp Pink — Heated Seats – If Equipped
6 — 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
7 — 15 Amp Blue Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
8 — 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC)/
Wireless Control Module (WCM)/Wireless
Ignition Node (WIN)
9 — 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
10 — 25 Amp Natural Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
11 * — — —
12 * — — —
13 * — — —
14 — 10 Amp Red AC Heater Control/Cluster/Security Mod-
ule – If Equipped

15 — 20 Amp Yellow Active Damper – If Equipped
16 — 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seat Module – If Equipped
17 — 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Cluster
18 — 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel)
19 — 10 Amp Red Stop Lights
20 — — —
21 — — —
22 — — —
23 — — —
24 — — —
7
25 — — —
26 — — —
27 — 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
28 — 15 Amp Blue Ignition Run, AC Heater Control/
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

29 — 5 Amp Tan Cluster/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/STOP
LIGHT Switch
30 — 10 Amp Red Door Modules/Power Mirrors/Steering
Control Module (SCM)
31 — — —
32 — — —
33 — — —
34 — — —
35 — 5 Amp Tan Antenna Module – If Equipped/Power
Mirrors
36 — 25 Amp Natural Hands-Free Phone – If Equipped/Radio/
Amplifier Feed
37 — 15 Amp Blue Transmission
38 — 10 Amp Red Cargo Light/Vehicle Information Module
– If Equipped

39 — 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
40 — 5 Amp Orange Auto Inside Rearview Mirror/Heated
Seats – If Equipped/Switch Bank
41 — — —
42 30 Amp Pink — Front Blower Motor
43 30 Amp Pink — Rear Window Defroster
44 20 Amp Blue — Amplifier/Sunroof – If Equipped
*Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit experience temporary or permanent loss of these sys-
breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized tems, see your authorized dealer for service.
dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by
the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The passenger 7
seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in
cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power window
switch, and the passenger power window switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13. If you
VEHICLE STORAGE Interior Bulbs
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 Bulb Number
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Rear Courtesy/Reading W5W
battery. Lamps
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Rear Compartment 562
(Trunk) Lamp
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Overhead Console Read- 578
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes ing Lamps
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Glove Box Lamp – If 194
possibility of compressor damage when the system is Equipped
started again. Door Courtesy 562
REPLACEMENT BULBS Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass Optional Door Map LED (Serviced at Autho-
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved Pocket/Cupholder rized Dealer)
and should not be used for replacement. For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Number NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
Headlamp – High Inten- D1S (Serviced at Autho- spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
sity Discharge (HID) rized Dealer) conditions change to allow the condensation to change
Halogen Headlamp H13 back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
Front Park/Turn Lamp 3157A accelerate the clearing process.
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W (Serviced at Au- Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
thorized Dealer) Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Front Side Marker 168 Headlamps — If Equipped
Tail Lamp 3057K See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp 3057K Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Rear Side Marker 168 Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity 7
Backup Lamp 921 Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
Center High-Mount Stop LED (Serviced at Autho- HID Headlamps
Lamp (CHMSL) rized Dealer)
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
License 168 High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or
an authorized dealer for service.
similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard
side to disengage the clip.
WARNING!
NOTE: If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned scratch the paint.
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized 2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
dealer for service. the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
ment bulb.
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.
Tail Lamp Fasteners

4. Pull back the trunk liner. 7
5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
Tail Lamp Retainer
3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
assembly. access the bulbs.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.
Removing Tail Lamp Assembly

7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
Reinstall Tail Lamp Retainer 2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
14. Close the trunk. 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and 7
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
Socket Assembly
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine 11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equiva-
lent) 7
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equiva-
lent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 En-
gine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 En-
gine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap
0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap
0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Fuel Selection (3.6L and 5.7L Engine – Automatic 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
Transmission)
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine – Manual Transmission) 91 Octane
7
Chassis

Manual Transmission – If We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Equipped Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Equipped Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting
MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
Rear Axle – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140
(API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90
(API GL-5) with MOPAR® Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive.
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
CONTENTS N
A
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
N equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
T Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
N indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
A
N scheduled maintenance. On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
C in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
E Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
S vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
C
H such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
E cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
D influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
U
L quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
E tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
S early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Instrument Panel” for further information.
8 vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
miles (805 km).
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 M
A
Severe Duty All Models Required Maintenance Intervals. I
N
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following T
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This page for the required maintenance intervals. E
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty N
A
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil N
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Change Indicator System: C
• Check engine oil level E
• Change oil and filter
• Check windshield washer fluid level • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular S
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service C
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or H
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as E
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, D
required
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service. U
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses L
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake and park brake E
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed. S
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses 8
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights • Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
Mileage or time passed
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
E
N (whichever comes first)
A
N
C Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
128,000 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
E
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
S
C
H Additional Inspections
E
D Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
U Inspect front suspension, tie rod
L ends, boot seals and replace if X X X X X X X
E necessary.
S
Inspect the rear axle fluid. X X X X
8 Inspect the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped), add as neces- X X X X
sary.
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first) N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
N
C
E
Inspect the brake linings, replace S
X X X X X X X
as necessary. C
Adjust park brake on vehicles H
equipped with four wheel disc X X X X X X X E
brakes. D
U
Additional Maintenance L
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X E
S
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
X X X X X X X 8
Replace spark plugs (3.6L en-
X
gine). **
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
T
E
N Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
N
C
E
S Replace spark plugs (5.7L en-
X
C gine). **
H Flush and replace the engine
E coolant at 10 years or 150,000
D X X
miles (240,000 km) whichever
U comes first.
L
E
S
8
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
(whichever comes first) N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
N
C
E
Change the manual transmission S
fluid (if equipped) if using your C
vehicle for any of the following: H
Most of your driving is at sus- E
X X X D
tained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C), U
driving in dusty conditions, or L
stop and go driving. E
S
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter if using your 8
vehicle for any of the following: X
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
T
E
N Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
N
C
E
S Change automatic transmission
X
C fluid and filter.
H Change the rear axle fluid if us-
E ing your vehicle for any of the
D X X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-
U road, or frequent trailer towing.
L
E Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
S necessary.
8 ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
A
WARNING! I
N
T
• You can be badly injured working on or around a E
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you N
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If A
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- E
chanic.
S
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve- C
hicle could result in a component malfunction and H
effect vehicle handling and performance. This E
D
could cause an accident. U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .507 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .508 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .508
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 9
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .512
506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality 9
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico Contact: Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 9
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, known to the State of California to cause cancer and
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
contract documents, and contact the person listed in products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
those documents. cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
We appreciate that you have made a major investment and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and WARRANTY INFORMATION
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
concerns.
MOPAR® PARTS campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
operating at its best. Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer. should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and 9
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- 9
requirements in addition to these grades. mance.
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
WARNING!
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel, than the minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or WARNING!
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
Temperature Grades a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat heat buildup and possible tire failure.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
INDEX
10
516 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Alarm
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .446 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
INDEX 517
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .276 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .96
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .28 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
10
518 INDEX
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Caps, Filler Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .87
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .81
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Cleaning
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .439 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Connector
Child Restraints UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
INDEX 519
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .265 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .460 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Dipsticks
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
10
520 INDEX
Disposal Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .211
Door Locks Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .221
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Emergency, In Case of
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Driving Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .227 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .439
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .478 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .172 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
INDEX 521
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Filters
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Flashers
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
10
522 INDEX
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Fluid Level Checks Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .492 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
INDEX 523
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 . . .399
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Gauges Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 . . .162
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .166
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 . . .166
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 . . .155
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Hazard Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .166
10
524 INDEX
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Hitches Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .185 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Key Fob
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
INDEX 525
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . .211
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
10
526 INDEX
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .218
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .210
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .220 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .168 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .220 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
INDEX 527
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Mode
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .220 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
10
528 INDEX
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .344
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Power
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .197
INDEX 529
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Pretensioners Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Remote Control
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .460 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .19
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .274
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
10
530 INDEX
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
INDEX 531
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .283
SENTRY KEY® Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Sound System
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .220 Specifications
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
10
532 INDEX
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .58
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Steering Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .276
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .343
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .274 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
INDEX 533
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .393
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
10
534 INDEX
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Transfer Case Uconnect®
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Uconnect® 130
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode . . . . . . . .248
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .240
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .28 Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23 Uconnect® phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .265
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
INDEX 535
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Washer
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Water
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Voice Command Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .210 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi- The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
cle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must shielded coaxial cable.
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
be observed during installation.
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
may require special precautions.
negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection All installations should be checked for possible interference
should not be fused. between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
2014 Challenger
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Challenger
Chrysler Group LLC
14D491-126-AC Third Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Dodge User Manual 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dodge User Manual 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dodge User Manual 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Challenger

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Emergency Key Removal

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) 2

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Doors closed

Power Door Locks

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

Latch Plate To Buckle (Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat-

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

Tether Strap Anchorages

Tether Strap Mounting

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Fluid Leaks

Automatic Dimming Mirror

Power Mirror Control

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

Voice Commands all

language select phone select

Easy Entry Lever

Active Head Restraints — Front Seats

Folding Rear Seat

Folding Rear Seat Folded Rear Seat

The front fog light switch is built into the head-

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

Park Assist System Off Slow Tone

Fast Tone Continuous Tone

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Rear Cupholders Sliding Console Armrest

The rear window defroster button is located on

1 — Air Outlets 6 — ESC OFF Switch 11 — Ignition Switch

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Fuel Saver Mode–On Fuel Saver Mode–Off

This light will illuminate when the sport mode

Compass Variance Map

EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

(Continued) NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

16-Digit Character 16-Digit Character

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre- Playback Of MP3 Files

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music

CAUTION! Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the 4